Upload
ender
View
216
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 148
5 ECHO SOUNDER
LS-4100
Back
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 248
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD iii
SYSTEM OVERVIEW iv
1 OPERATION 1 11 Control Description 1 12 Turning the Power OnOff 1 13 Adjusting Display Contrast
Brilliance2 14 Choosing a Display Frequency 2
15 Menu Operating Procedure 5 16 Automatic Operation5 17 Manual Operation 6 18 Measuring Depth 8 19 Choosing Picture Advanced
Speed 8110 Suppressing Interference 9 111 Suppressing Low Level Noise 9112 Erasing Weak Echoes 10 113 A-scope Display 10 114 Alarms 11 115 Waypoints12 116 Setting Up Nav Data Displays 15117 Other Menu Items 16
2 SYSTEM amp INSTALLATIONMENUS1821 System Menu 18
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING 21
31 Maintenance21 32 Cleaning the Display Unit 21 33 Transducer Maintenance 21 34 Replacing the Fuse 21
35 Battery Voltage Alert 21 36 Troubleshooting22 37 Diagnostics22 38 Test Pattern 23 39 Memory Clear23
4 INSTALLATION 24 41 Display Unit 24 42 Thru-hull Mount Transducer 24 43 Transom Mount Transducer 26 44 Inside-hull Transducer 28 45 Optional Triducer29 46 Optional Water
TemperatureSpeed Sensor34 47 Wiring 34 48 IEC 61162-1 Data Sentences 35 49 Installation Menu 36
SPECIFICATIONS SP-1
OUTLINE DRAWING
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 348
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety Instructions for the Operator
W RNING
Do not open the equipment
There are no uer-serviceable partsinside
Do not disassemble or modify theequipment
Fire electrical shock or serious injurycan result
Immediately turn off the power at theswitchboard if the equipment isemitting smoke or fire
Continued use of the equipment cancause fire or electrical shock Contact aFURUNO agent for service
Do not maneuver the vessel basedon the depth indication alone
Grounding may result
Use the proper fuseFuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result indamage to the equipment
Do no turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depth
indication possibly resulting in adangerous situation See Adjusting thegain on page 7 for details
UTION
WARNINGTo avoid electrical shock do notremove cover No user-serviceableparts inside
NameWarning LabelType 02-146-1022Code No 100-306-050
The high quality LCD shows 9999of its pixels The remaining 01 maydrop out or brighten due to the pro-perty of the LCD however this is nota sign of malfunction
A warning label is attached to theequipment Do not remove the labelIf the label is missing or damagedcontact a FURUNO agent or dealer
NOTI E
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448
ii
Safety Instructions for the Installer
W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation
Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on
Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location
Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation
Use the specified power cable
Use of other power cable may result infire
UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present
Performance will be affected
The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable
- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable
The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable
Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass
Displayunit
Standard Steeringcompass compass
04 m 03 m
Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548
iii
FOREWORD
A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability
For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable
reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers
This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its
intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance
We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes
Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment
FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD
The main features of the LS-4100 are
bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight
bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen
bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data
bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)
bull White line feature helps discriminate
fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides
range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)
bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648
iv
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System configuration
Power supply12 VDC
DISPLAY UNITLS-4100
GPS Navigatoror
Wind Indicator
Transducer
Water temperature Speed sensor
ST-02MSBST-02PSB
520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD
Standard Option User supply
Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment
POWERBRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENUMODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Equipment lists
Standard supply
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1
520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126
Transducer
525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount
525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261
1
Transom mount
Installation Materials(CP02-07401)
bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)
Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)
Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)
Optional equipment
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor
ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987
Selectone Thru-hull type
Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 248
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD iii
SYSTEM OVERVIEW iv
1 OPERATION 1 11 Control Description 1 12 Turning the Power OnOff 1 13 Adjusting Display Contrast
Brilliance2 14 Choosing a Display Frequency 2
15 Menu Operating Procedure 5 16 Automatic Operation5 17 Manual Operation 6 18 Measuring Depth 8 19 Choosing Picture Advanced
Speed 8110 Suppressing Interference 9 111 Suppressing Low Level Noise 9112 Erasing Weak Echoes 10 113 A-scope Display 10 114 Alarms 11 115 Waypoints12 116 Setting Up Nav Data Displays 15117 Other Menu Items 16
2 SYSTEM amp INSTALLATIONMENUS1821 System Menu 18
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING 21
31 Maintenance21 32 Cleaning the Display Unit 21 33 Transducer Maintenance 21 34 Replacing the Fuse 21
35 Battery Voltage Alert 21 36 Troubleshooting22 37 Diagnostics22 38 Test Pattern 23 39 Memory Clear23
4 INSTALLATION 24 41 Display Unit 24 42 Thru-hull Mount Transducer 24 43 Transom Mount Transducer 26 44 Inside-hull Transducer 28 45 Optional Triducer29 46 Optional Water
TemperatureSpeed Sensor34 47 Wiring 34 48 IEC 61162-1 Data Sentences 35 49 Installation Menu 36
SPECIFICATIONS SP-1
OUTLINE DRAWING
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 348
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety Instructions for the Operator
W RNING
Do not open the equipment
There are no uer-serviceable partsinside
Do not disassemble or modify theequipment
Fire electrical shock or serious injurycan result
Immediately turn off the power at theswitchboard if the equipment isemitting smoke or fire
Continued use of the equipment cancause fire or electrical shock Contact aFURUNO agent for service
Do not maneuver the vessel basedon the depth indication alone
Grounding may result
Use the proper fuseFuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result indamage to the equipment
Do no turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depth
indication possibly resulting in adangerous situation See Adjusting thegain on page 7 for details
UTION
WARNINGTo avoid electrical shock do notremove cover No user-serviceableparts inside
NameWarning LabelType 02-146-1022Code No 100-306-050
The high quality LCD shows 9999of its pixels The remaining 01 maydrop out or brighten due to the pro-perty of the LCD however this is nota sign of malfunction
A warning label is attached to theequipment Do not remove the labelIf the label is missing or damagedcontact a FURUNO agent or dealer
NOTI E
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448
ii
Safety Instructions for the Installer
W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation
Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on
Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location
Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation
Use the specified power cable
Use of other power cable may result infire
UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present
Performance will be affected
The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable
- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable
The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable
Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass
Displayunit
Standard Steeringcompass compass
04 m 03 m
Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548
iii
FOREWORD
A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability
For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable
reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers
This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its
intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance
We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes
Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment
FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD
The main features of the LS-4100 are
bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight
bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen
bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data
bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)
bull White line feature helps discriminate
fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides
range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)
bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648
iv
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System configuration
Power supply12 VDC
DISPLAY UNITLS-4100
GPS Navigatoror
Wind Indicator
Transducer
Water temperature Speed sensor
ST-02MSBST-02PSB
520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD
Standard Option User supply
Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment
POWERBRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENUMODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Equipment lists
Standard supply
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1
520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126
Transducer
525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount
525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261
1
Transom mount
Installation Materials(CP02-07401)
bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)
Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)
Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)
Optional equipment
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor
ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987
Selectone Thru-hull type
Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 348
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety Instructions for the Operator
W RNING
Do not open the equipment
There are no uer-serviceable partsinside
Do not disassemble or modify theequipment
Fire electrical shock or serious injurycan result
Immediately turn off the power at theswitchboard if the equipment isemitting smoke or fire
Continued use of the equipment cancause fire or electrical shock Contact aFURUNO agent for service
Do not maneuver the vessel basedon the depth indication alone
Grounding may result
Use the proper fuseFuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result indamage to the equipment
Do no turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depth
indication possibly resulting in adangerous situation See Adjusting thegain on page 7 for details
UTION
WARNINGTo avoid electrical shock do notremove cover No user-serviceableparts inside
NameWarning LabelType 02-146-1022Code No 100-306-050
The high quality LCD shows 9999of its pixels The remaining 01 maydrop out or brighten due to the pro-perty of the LCD however this is nota sign of malfunction
A warning label is attached to theequipment Do not remove the labelIf the label is missing or damagedcontact a FURUNO agent or dealer
NOTI E
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448
ii
Safety Instructions for the Installer
W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation
Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on
Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location
Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation
Use the specified power cable
Use of other power cable may result infire
UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present
Performance will be affected
The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable
- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable
The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable
Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass
Displayunit
Standard Steeringcompass compass
04 m 03 m
Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548
iii
FOREWORD
A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability
For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable
reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers
This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its
intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance
We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes
Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment
FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD
The main features of the LS-4100 are
bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight
bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen
bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data
bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)
bull White line feature helps discriminate
fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides
range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)
bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648
iv
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System configuration
Power supply12 VDC
DISPLAY UNITLS-4100
GPS Navigatoror
Wind Indicator
Transducer
Water temperature Speed sensor
ST-02MSBST-02PSB
520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD
Standard Option User supply
Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment
POWERBRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENUMODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Equipment lists
Standard supply
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1
520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126
Transducer
525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount
525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261
1
Transom mount
Installation Materials(CP02-07401)
bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)
Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)
Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)
Optional equipment
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor
ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987
Selectone Thru-hull type
Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448
ii
Safety Instructions for the Installer
W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation
Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on
Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location
Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation
Use the specified power cable
Use of other power cable may result infire
UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present
Performance will be affected
The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable
- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable
The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable
Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass
Displayunit
Standard Steeringcompass compass
04 m 03 m
Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water
The transducer may be damaged
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548
iii
FOREWORD
A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability
For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable
reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers
This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its
intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance
We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes
Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment
FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD
The main features of the LS-4100 are
bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight
bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen
bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data
bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)
bull White line feature helps discriminate
fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides
range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)
bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648
iv
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System configuration
Power supply12 VDC
DISPLAY UNITLS-4100
GPS Navigatoror
Wind Indicator
Transducer
Water temperature Speed sensor
ST-02MSBST-02PSB
520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD
Standard Option User supply
Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment
POWERBRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENUMODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Equipment lists
Standard supply
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1
520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126
Transducer
525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount
525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261
1
Transom mount
Installation Materials(CP02-07401)
bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)
Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)
Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)
Optional equipment
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor
ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987
Selectone Thru-hull type
Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548
iii
FOREWORD
A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability
For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable
reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers
This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its
intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance
We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes
Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment
FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD
The main features of the LS-4100 are
bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight
bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen
bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data
bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)
bull White line feature helps discriminate
fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides
range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)
bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648
iv
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System configuration
Power supply12 VDC
DISPLAY UNITLS-4100
GPS Navigatoror
Wind Indicator
Transducer
Water temperature Speed sensor
ST-02MSBST-02PSB
520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD
Standard Option User supply
Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment
POWERBRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENUMODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Equipment lists
Standard supply
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1
520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126
Transducer
525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount
525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261
1
Transom mount
Installation Materials(CP02-07401)
bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)
Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)
Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)
Optional equipment
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor
ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987
Selectone Thru-hull type
Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648
iv
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System configuration
Power supply12 VDC
DISPLAY UNITLS-4100
GPS Navigatoror
Wind Indicator
Transducer
Water temperature Speed sensor
ST-02MSBST-02PSB
520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD
Standard Option User supply
Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment
POWERBRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENUMODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Equipment lists
Standard supply
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1
520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126
Transducer
525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount
525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261
1
Transom mount
Installation Materials(CP02-07401)
bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)
Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)
Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)
Optional equipment
Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor
ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987
Selectone Thru-hull type
Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748
1
1 OPERATION
11 Control Description
Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM
Openscloses menuescapes from current
operation
Selects display mode
Adjusts gain
Selects basic display range
Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance
Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint
POWER
BRILL
MARK
GAIN
RANGE
ESCMENU
MODE
LS-4100
ECHO SOUNDER
Display unit
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs
12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more
than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may
press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848
2
Program version no
ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01
5 ECHO SOUNDER
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD
Start-up screen
To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining
until power is turned off is counted downon the screen
Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings
13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance
1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
CONTST 4 Min Max
BRILLMin Max
4
Brilliancecontrast adjustment window
2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)
3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow
Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary
Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds
14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency
Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)
1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window
MODE
SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz
Mode selection window
2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $
3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948
3
Single frequency display
50 kHz
The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition
200 kHz
The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed
observation of fish schools
50 kHz
200 kHz
Frequency and coverage area
466
FishSchool
Bottom
0
20
40
50k 1100
Level Bar
Depth
Frequency
Picture Advance Speed
Range Scale
Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)
407 degF162kt Nav Display
MinuteMarker(Shows time
Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine
60
Typical 50 kHz display
Dual frequency display
The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting
frequencies
50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture
496
0050200 11
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80 Dual frequency display
Marker-zoom display
This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded
Zoomedfishschool
Single frequency display
Variable rangemarker
This sectionis zoomed
Zoom marker
Marker-zoom display
170
250
0
Fishschool
0
40
10
20
30
0050k 11
21
20
19
18
17
22
Marker-zoom display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048
4
Bottom-zoom display
This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom
contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen
0
Bottom-zoom display
298
Bottom
0
40
10
20
30
32
31
30
29
28
27
Switched withdepth
Singlefrequencydisplay
Zoommarker
0050k 11
Bottom-zoom display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable
Bottom-lock display
Zoommarker
Zoomedfish
This sectionis zoomed
217
0
Singlefrequencydisplay
Fishschool
0
40
Bottom displayed flat
10
20
30
0
1
2
3
4
550k 11
Bottom-lock display
Nav data displays
The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor
You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display
Depth
694 m
Trip meter
100 nm
Odometer
56 nm
NAV DATA-1 display
NAV DATA-2 display
Temperature
655 deg F
172
1 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
Speed
kt
20
50
40
60
30
10
0
Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148
5
15 Menu OperatingProcedure
The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the
basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used
[MENU] Exit
(12)
Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode
AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off
A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low
Pageno
Main menu page 1
2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below
[MENU] Exit
(22)
GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST
TRIP RESET
GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft
ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU
Main menu page 2
3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE
Off CruisingFishing
Auto mode options window
4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation
16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works
The automatic function automatically
chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to
display the bottom echo on thescreen
bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone
bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted
Choosing automatic operation
The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options
window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as
appropriate
ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248
6
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or
(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen
Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually
Range offset
To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as
below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key
+0 ft
AUTO RANGE OFFSET
Auto range offset window
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Gain offset
Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key
Min Max 0
AUTO GAIN OFFSET
Auto gain offset window
2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)
3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen
Choosing range
The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth
Choosing basic range
The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu
Default ranges
Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300
feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000
fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150
hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200
PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200
Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the
[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page
2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348
7
1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft
Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the window
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows
Display
Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth
Range and display shift concept
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu
3 Press to open the shift optionswindow
0ft
Shift window
4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window
Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth
Adjusting the gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters
Use the proper gain setting
Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation
UTION
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain
1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears
Min Max
50k 3
200k 2
GAIN
Gain adjustment window
2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency
3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448
8
18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM
on the object which you wish tomeasure range
2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM
0
20
40
60
80496
398
VRM
VRM depth
50k 11
How to measure depth with the VRM
19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed
The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition
Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41
(
)
Fast
Slow
Picture advance options window
4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo
The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped
Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation
UTION
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548
9
110 SuppressingInterference
Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Interference fromother sounder
Electrical interference
Forms of interference
Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed
111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise
Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due
to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER
from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key
Clutter appearance
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648
10
112 Erasing WeakEchoes
Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the
display in low intensity tones
Weakechoes
Appearance of weak echoes
These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL
LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options
window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of
suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key
113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition
Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display
323
10
20
30
40
0
A-scope display
Single frequency display
Strong
reflection(bottom)
Weakreflection(fish or noise)
50k 11
Strongreflection(fish)
A-scope display
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Press
or$
to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748
11
114 AlarmsAlarm description
The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms
bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)
Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed
Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range
Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom
display must be turned on to use thisalarm
Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset
Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed
Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set
Activating an alarm
1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM
MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM
menu
ALARM
(12)
[MENU] Exit
ALARM
(22)
[MENU] Exit
BOTTOM On FROM 5ft
RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On
FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On
FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium
TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F
SPEED Off FROM 00kt
RANGE 10kt
ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m
Pageno
Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu
4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate
5 Press to show the options menu
Off On
Off InsideOutside
Temp Speed Alarm Types
Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff
Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type
Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set
7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848
12
8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu
0ft
Depth
632 deg F
Temperature
10 kt
Speed Depth temperature speed setting
window10 Use or $ to set starting depth
temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom
11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature
alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16
16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu
Weak
MediumStrong Fish level options
18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm
Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes
(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)
19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left
Alarm icon
Alarm rangeStartingpoint
Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)
Temperature alarm (deg
C ordeg
F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm
Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)
How the alarm works
Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure
Silencing the buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated
Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active
115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important
echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered
bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen
bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)
Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948
13
Registering a waypoint on thescreen
1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator
50k
496
1100
20
40
60
80
0
Cursor
WAYPOINT ENTRY
( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel
50 kHz display
2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay
3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator
A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
rase
Waypoint data display
Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry
4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name
5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window
WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
01------ ENT
rase
Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or
to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip
7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Registering waypoint by LL
1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048
14
WAYPOINT LIST
01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------
[MENU] Exit
Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty
waypoint and press Press again
NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E
05
[MENU] Exit
04------ ENT
rase
New waypoint window name entry
5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor
6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar
to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to
register the waypoint
Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open
the main menu
2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint
and press 5 Use or to choose the item to
edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry
window7 Use or to set character $ or
to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key
Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT
LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list
4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo
5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the
waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank
8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu
Setting destination waypoint
Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu
3 Press to open the waypoints list
Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------
Waypoint list
4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148
15
116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays
The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired
1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up
2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window
3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window
NAV DATA SETUP
Window Selection Data Selection
[MENU] Exit
NAV DATA SETUP window
4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection
5 Use
or$
to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)(5)
(6)(7)(8)
Two-data
display
Three-data
display
Four-data
displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction
= Graphic display
Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish
Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
1 05 0 05 1
Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg
DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC
XTEscale
BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection
DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE
Wind APP
WIND GRAPHIC
60
120
90
030
150180
120
150
90
60
30
120 deg
Speed 103 ms
COMPASS GRAPHIC
SPEED GRAPHIC
172
Speed
20
50
40
60
30
10
01 05 0 05 1
025 nm
XTE
XTE GRAPHIC
kt
Bearing todestinationwaypoint
Course
Brg30 deg
Cse90 deg
N
E
XTE scale
Speed-ometer
Nav data display-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248
16
DIGITAL DISPLAYS
Course
123 deg
COURSE
Depth
328 ft
DEPTH
Heading TRUEMAG
318 deg
HEADING
Odometer
56 nm
ODOMETER
Position GPS 3D
30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E
POSITION
Temperature
698 degF
WATER TEMPERATURE
Trip meter
121 nm
TRIP DISTANCE
Time to Go
00 H30 M
TIME-TO-GO
1018 hpa
AIR PRESSURE
Air Pressure
Speed
193 kt
SPEED
Rng
121 nm
RANGE amp BEARING
Brg
140 deg
Wind Speed APP
80 ms
WIND SPEED
Wind Dir APP
138 deg
WIND DIRECTION
APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending
on menu settingamp To destination waypoint
Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay
Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost
= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix
NAV data display-2
117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned
Page 1
HUE (Picture Color)
Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu
2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
WHITE LINE
The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in
white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom
1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu
2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu
3 Press to show the optionswindow
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348
17
4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)
Fish schoolclearly shown
White line
0
20
40
60
80
050k 11
526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
How white line works
DEEP GAIN
ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Page 2
TRIP RESET
This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu
3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance
Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory
GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50
If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu
3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow
4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close
the menu
DRAFT
The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows
Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu
2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu
3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)
4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448
18
2 SYSTEM MENU
The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing
SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English
DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F
TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2
WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(23)
NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own
TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)
Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F
[MENU] Exit
SYSTEM MENU
(33)
BASIC RANGE1 15 ft
RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)
ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)
ZOOM MARKER On
[MENU] Exit
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Page no
System menus
21 System MenuPage 1
LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key
DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet
fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)
SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data
WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and
mph Requires wind speed data
TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data
TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires
water temperature data
m526
0
20
40
60
80
00 050k 11
40
80
70
50
60
TemperatureScale
TemperatureGraph
638 deg F162kt
Water temperature display (wide degF)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548
19
NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata
WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh
KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off
BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication
Page 2
NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or
wind speed Requires appropriate navdata
407 deg F162kt
Nav window
NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30
TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc
BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata
WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary
TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA
TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA
SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed
data
TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to
+40degF
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648
20
SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50
Page 3
BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth
unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet
ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50
meters)
BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)
ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the
bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748
21
3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING
W RNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment
Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment
31 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come
Checking
Item Action
Transducercable
Check cable for damage
Power cabletransducercable plug
Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary
Display unitground
Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary
Power supplyvoltage
Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem
32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit
Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings
33 TransducerMaintenance
Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper
34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty
W RNINGUse the proper fuse
Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment
35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low
Battery icon and meaning
Icon Meaning
Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off
Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848
22
36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation
Troubleshooting table
Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears
bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable
no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears
bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo
bull transducer plugbull
transducer cableecho appears butno zero line
bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo
sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine
life is clinging to thetransducer face
bull if sediments arepresent in the water
bull if the bottom is too soft
to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise
bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine
bull if the unit is properlygrounded
bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby
the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull sensor plug
the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent
bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator
bull navigator
37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test
ROM OKRAM OKNMEA
Temp 682 deg F
Speed 100kmh
Power 124 VBody 39 deg C
Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit
Level bar
= Program version no
Water
TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)
GPS (48502180) OK
Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)
Test display
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948
23
4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)
5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal
6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes
7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again
38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones
1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN
2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black
3 Press again and the screen turnswhite
4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display
5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK
Test patterns
39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings
1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR
2 Press to open the optionswindow
YES NO
Clear memory display
3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared
4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048
24
4 INSTALLATION
41 Display UnitMounting considerations
The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind
bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight
bull The temperature and humidity should
be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust
pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well
ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and
vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking
purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables
bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters
Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the
overhead with tapping screws(supplied)
2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit
3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs
Mounting on the bulkhead Flush
mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)
42 Thru-hull MountTransducer
Transducer mounting location
The thru-hull mount transducer
(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page
The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by
movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem
bull The transducer must always remain
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148
25
submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed
bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of
the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude
28
22
120
68
30
520-5PSD
24
120
68
87520-5MSD
Unit mm
Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions
Acceptable transducer mounting
locations
Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern
15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)
Within the wetted bottom area
Deadrise angle within 15 deg
HIGH SPEED-V HULL
Suitable transducer mounting locations
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
FairingBlock
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Hull
Deep-V Hull
Hull
Flat Washer
Rubber Washer
Flat Hull
CorkWasher
Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations
Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer
1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull
2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert
turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248
26
BOWHole for stuffing tube
Upper Half
Lower Half
Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block
3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically
4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting
5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is
properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline
Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat
has been launched
Transducer preparation
Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced
DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected
43 Transom MountTransducer
The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer
520-5PWD
There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)
Flat Hull
D
Dgt50 cm
Deep-VHull
520-5PWD mounting locations
Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull
A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth
1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation
2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)
3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348
27
Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds
4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces
No1 M5 x 14
5 x 20
5 x 20
2 to 5
Tape
Hull
Transom mount transducer
mounting flush with hull
Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull
This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer
5 x 20
No 2M5 x 14
5 x 20
Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull
525-5PWD
Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull
Transom
Transom
Stripe over 10
Parallel with hull
Mount at the stripe
less than 10
525-5PWD mounting location
Installing the 525-5PWD
Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448
28
2 to 5
Transducer
Bracket
Hull
Epoxy material
525-5PWD mounting
44 Inside-hullTransducer
The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below
Necessary tools
You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease
Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the
boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine
room
Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be
where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater
bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull
bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling
bull You will finalize the mounting location
through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later
50 cm
50 cm15 cm15 cm
13
12
Transducer mountinglocation
Centerline
Inside-hull transducer mounting location
Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove
any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted
2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC
before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant
Transducer
SiliconeSealant
Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant
4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant
Checking the installation
1 Connect the battery to the display
unit2 Turn on the display unit
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548
29
3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ
4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu
5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select
Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain
to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key
9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key
10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo
11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to
turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer
with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer
elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo
d) Check the installation again
Final preparation
Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying
Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours
45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD
The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42
φ79 mm
33 mm200-12 UNthreads
φ51 mm
27 mm
7 mm
140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD
525ST-PWD
The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the
sensor
Pre-test for speed and temperature
Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase
Tools and materials needed
ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for
Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648
30
Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)
Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )
Mounting location
To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water
Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable
Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward
Height
Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)
Height required at mounting location
Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull
irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller
75 mm(3)
minimum beyondswing radius
Mounting location on single drive boat
Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives
Installation of bracket
1 Cut out the installation template
shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace
Align template vertically
Deadrise angle
Slope of hullparallel towaterline
Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom
Positioning the template
Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask
3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is
not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748
31
4 If you know your transom angle the
bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed
5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo
self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo
Installation templatefor starboard side of boat
Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles
16 deg through 22 deg
Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles
2 deg through 15 deg
Align arrow with bottom of transom
AA A
BB B
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848
32
Adjusting
1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm
(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull
11 deg transom angleNO SHIM
12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM
2 deg -10 deg transom
angle
19 deg -22 deg transom
angleshim withtaper up
shim withtaper down
parallelparallel parallel
slightangle
angletoo steep
anglereversed
YES NONO
YES YESYES
Sensor position and transom angle
Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur
2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in
place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up
3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it
Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self
tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time
4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed
5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws
Cable cover
Cableclamp
50 mm (2)
Hull projection 3 mm (18)
Vertical adjustment and cable routing
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948
33
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward
Step 1 Step 2
Latch
Retainingcover
Pivotarm (2)
Slot (2)
Step 4
Step 3
Attaching the sensor to the bracket
2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket
3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place
4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket
5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway
Cable routing
Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline
Never cut the cable or remote the
connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask
1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)
2 Route the cable over or through thetransom
3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil
4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole
5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting
holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint
7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the
transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom
8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048
34
9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable
jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage
46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor
Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below
Mounting considerations
Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The
sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation
bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat
bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater
1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm
diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the
sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the
flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole
6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange
7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut
8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor
Locknut
Face notchtoward bow
Flange Nut
Coat withsilicone sealant Brim
φ 77
51
123
Water temperaturespeed sensor
ST-02MSB ST-02PSB
47 Wiring
Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance
Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below
+ line (red)
Fuse holder
Cable tie How to fix fuse holder
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148
35
Establishing the ground
The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible
The signal line ground is isolated from
the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire
there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )
Optional equipment
POWER connector
The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column
Connector Color Remarks
1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU
IEC-61162-1NMEA0183
3 RD-A YEL
4 RD-B GRN
IEC-61162-1
NMEA01835 + RED
6 - BLKPower input12 VDC
7 FG
Water tempspeed sensor
Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below
Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling
Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit
MJ-A10SPF
MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD
Fromtransducer
Fromsensor
Connection of converterconnector 02S4147
48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences
The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals
Input data sentences
Sentence Meaning
BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint
GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude
HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true
MDA Atmospheric pressure
MTW Water temperature
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248
36
Input data sentences (conrsquot)
Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and
angleRMA Recommended
minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended
minimum navigationinformation
RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data
VHW Water speed andheading
VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error
Output data sentences
Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below
transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)
Depth
MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended
minimumnavigationinformation
VHW Water speed andheading
TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key
= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid
49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation
1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing
the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
SIMULATION On
TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR
NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off
SET BOTTOM LEVEL
Installation Menu
= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn
Installation menu
SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active
1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow
2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode
3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower
4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display
5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2
NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)
The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor
When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348
37
WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting
1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears
2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window
3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate
InOut Input and Output (default
setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)
4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window
5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data
Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only
On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment
6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again
GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a
WAAS receiver for example GP-320B
Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability
1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press
to open the GPS WAAS options
window
Off
WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo
(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)
4 Turn off the power
BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication
And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear
1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears
Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )
Bottom level display
2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture
3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again
Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448
SP - 1 E2371S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100
1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting
13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms
2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12
Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range
Range SettingRange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display
rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500
Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250
PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300
24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m
Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)
3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030
GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE
32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required
4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5
6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548
M a r
4
0 3
D-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648
Mar 4 03
Mar 4 03
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748
M a r
3
0 3
S-1
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0
892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848
FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN
Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200
FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved
B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005
Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100
0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0